blob: 18ac733afc91fe6fb9fa1a61f4df853002fe8258 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020024#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070025
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040026/**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35/**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070039 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010042 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070046 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070047 */
48
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040049/**
50 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070051 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56/**
57 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070058 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040059 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070071 */
72
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020073/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040074 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010088/**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
102 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
103 *
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
106 *
107 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
108 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
109 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
110 *
111 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
112 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
113 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
114 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
115 * .release_buffered_frames().
116 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
117 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
118 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
119 */
120
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500121struct device;
122
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400123/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200124 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
125 *
126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 */
129enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132};
133
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
135
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800137 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
142 */
143enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
144 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
145 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
148};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200149#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
294 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100301 */
302enum ieee80211_bss_change {
303 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
304 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200307 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300315 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300318 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100322 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300323 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200326
327 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100328};
329
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300330/*
331 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
332 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
333 * filtering will be disabled.
334 */
335#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
336
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100337/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200338 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
339 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200340 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300341 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300342 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
343 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
344 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700345 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200346enum ieee80211_event_type {
347 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200348 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300349 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300350 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200351};
352
353/**
354 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
355 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
356 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
357 */
358enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700359 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
360 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
361};
362
363/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200364 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200365 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
366 */
367struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
368 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
369};
370
371/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200372 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
373 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200374 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200375 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
376 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200377 */
378enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
379 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200380 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200381 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
382 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200383};
384
385/**
386 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
387 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
388 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
389 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
390 */
391enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
392 MLME_SUCCESS,
393 MLME_DENIED,
394 MLME_TIMEOUT,
395};
396
397/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200398 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200399 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
400 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
401 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
402 */
403struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
404 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
406 u16 reason;
407};
408
409/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300410 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
411 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
412 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300413 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300414 */
415struct ieee80211_ba_event {
416 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
417 u16 tid;
418 u16 ssn;
419};
420
421/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200422 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200423 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200425 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300426 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300427 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200428 */
429struct ieee80211_event {
430 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
431 union {
432 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200433 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300434 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200435 } u;
436};
437
438/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100439 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
440 *
441 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
442 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
443 *
444 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200445 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
446 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530447 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100448 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
449 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200450 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
451 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100452 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200453 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300454 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200455 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100456 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
457 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
458 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
459 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200460 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200461 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
462 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200463 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100464 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
465 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200466 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
467 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
468 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700469 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800470 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200471 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
472 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
473 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300474 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100475 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200476 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
477 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100478 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
479 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100480 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300481 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
482 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
483 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200484 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200485 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
486 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
487 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200488 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300489 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
490 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
491 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
492 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100493 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
494 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
495 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200496 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200497 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
498 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
499 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300500 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
501 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200502 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300503 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
504 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200505 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100506 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
507 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
508 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
509 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
510 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
511 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100512 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100513 */
514struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200515 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100516 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200517 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530518 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100519 u16 aid;
520 /* erp related data */
521 bool use_cts_prot;
522 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300523 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200524 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800525 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700526 u16 beacon_int;
527 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200528 u64 sync_tsf;
529 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100530 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100531 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300532 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100533 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200534 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200535 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
536 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100537 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300538 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100539 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200540 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200541 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300542 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300543 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
544 size_t ssid_len;
545 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200546 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100547 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100548 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100549};
550
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800551/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200552 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800553 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700554 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800555 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100556 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200557 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
558 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
559 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
560 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
561 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
562 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
563 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
564 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
565 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
566 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
567 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200568 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200569 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
570 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200571 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200572 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
573 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200574 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200575 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200576 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
577 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
578 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
579 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
580 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
581 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
582 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
583 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200584 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
585 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
586 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300587 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
588 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200589 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
590 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
591 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600592 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
593 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
594 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100595 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
596 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
597 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200598 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
599 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200600 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
601 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100602 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
603 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
604 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200605 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
606 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
607 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
608 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100609 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
610 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
611 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100612 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
613 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
614 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200615 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
616 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
617 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400618 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200619 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
620 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100621 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
622 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
623 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
624 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200625 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
626 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
627 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530628 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
629 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
630 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200631 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
632 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
633 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200634 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
635 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530636 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
637 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
638 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200639 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
640 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
641 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530642 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
643 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
644 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
645 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
646 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200647 *
648 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
649 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800650 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200651enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200652 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
655 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
656 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
657 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
658 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
659 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
660 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
661 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
662 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
663 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
664 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600665 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100666 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200667 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200668 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100669 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200670 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100671 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100672 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200673 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200677 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200679 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200683};
684
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200685#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
686
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200687/**
688 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
689 *
690 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
691 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530692 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
693 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200694 *
695 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
696 */
697enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
698 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530699 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200700};
701
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200702/*
703 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
704 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
705 */
706#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
709 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
710 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100711 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200712 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200713 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200714
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530715/**
716 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
717 * Rate Control algorithm.
718 *
719 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
720 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
721 *
722 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
723 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
724 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
725 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
726 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100727 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
728 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530729 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
730 * Greenfield mode.
731 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100732 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
734 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530735 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
736 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
737 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
738 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
739 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200740enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
741 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
742 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
743 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
744
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100745 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200746 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
747 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
748 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
749 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
750 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100751 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
752 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
753 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800754};
755
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200756
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200757/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
758#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200759
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200760/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
761#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
762
763/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200764#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200765
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200766/* maximum number of rate table entries */
767#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
768
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200769/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200770 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200771 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200772 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
773 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200774 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200775 *
776 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
777 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
778 *
779 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
780 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200781 *
782 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
783 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
784 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
785 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
786 * information
787 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
788 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
789 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
790 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
791 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
792 * information should then contain
793 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
794 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
795 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200796 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200797struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
798 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100799 u16 count:5,
800 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000801} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200802
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100803#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
804
805static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
806 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
807{
808 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200809 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
810 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100811}
812
813static inline u8
814ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
815{
816 return rate->idx & 0xF;
817}
818
819static inline u8
820ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
821{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200822 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100823}
824
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200825/**
826 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200827 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200828 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
829 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
830 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
831 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
832 *
833 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200834 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200835 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100836 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700837 * @control: union for control data
838 * @status: union for status data
839 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100840 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700841 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100842 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700843 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200844 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200845 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200846struct ieee80211_tx_info {
847 /* common information */
848 u32 flags;
849 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200850
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200851 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100852
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100853 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100854
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200855 union {
856 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200857 union {
858 /* rate control */
859 struct {
860 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
861 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
862 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200863 u8 use_rts:1;
864 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200865 u8 short_preamble:1;
866 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200867 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200868 };
869 /* only needed before rate control */
870 unsigned long jiffies;
871 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200872 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200873 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
874 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200875 u32 flags;
876 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200877 } control;
878 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200879 u64 cookie;
880 } ack;
881 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200882 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200883 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200884 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100885 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200886 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300887 u16 tx_time;
888 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200889 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200890 struct {
891 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
892 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200893 u8 pad[4];
894
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200895 void *rate_driver_data[
896 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
897 };
898 void *driver_data[
899 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200900 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700901};
902
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300903/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200904 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
905 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200906 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
907 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
908 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200909 *
910 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
911 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
912 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
913 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
914 */
915struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
916 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
917 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
918 const u8 *common_ies;
919 size_t common_ie_len;
920};
921
922
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200923static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
924{
925 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
926}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400927
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200928static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
929{
930 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
931}
932
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200933/**
934 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
935 *
936 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
937 *
938 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
939 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
940 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
941 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
942 *
943 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
944 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
945 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
946 */
947static inline void
948ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
949{
950 int i;
951
952 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
953 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
954 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
955 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
956 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
957 /* clear the rate counts */
958 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
959 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
960
961 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200962 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200963 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
964 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
965 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
966}
967
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400968
969/**
970 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
971 *
972 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
973 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
974 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
975 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400976 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
977 * verification has been done by the hardware.
978 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
979 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
980 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +0200981 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
982 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
983 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
984 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400985 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
986 * the frame.
987 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
988 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800989 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100990 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
991 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
992 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800993 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
994 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
995 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200996 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200997 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100998 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200999 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1000 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001001 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1002 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001003 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1004 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1005 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001006 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1007 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1008 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001009 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1010 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1011 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1012 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1013 * on this subframe
1014 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1015 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001016 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001017 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001018 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1019 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001020 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1021 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1022 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1023 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1024 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1025 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1026 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1027 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1028 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001029 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1030 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1031 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001032 */
1033enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001034 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1035 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1036 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1037 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1038 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1039 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001040 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001041 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1042 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1043 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1044 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1045 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1046 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1047 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001048 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
1049 /* bit 16 free */
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001050 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1051 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1052 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1053 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001054 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001055 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001056 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001057 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001058 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1059 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001060 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001061 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001062};
1063
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001064#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1065
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001066/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001067 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1068 *
1069 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1070 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1071 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001072 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001073 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001074 */
1075enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1076 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001077 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1078 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001079};
1080
1081/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001082 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1083 *
1084 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1085 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001086 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001087 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001088 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1089 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001090 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1091 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001092 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001093 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001094 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1095 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1096 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001097 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1098 * values were filled.
1099 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1100 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001101 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001102 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001103 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1104 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001105 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001106 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001107 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001108 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1109 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1110 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001111 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001112struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1113 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001114 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001115 u32 ampdu_reference;
1116 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001117 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001118 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001119 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001120 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001121 u8 rx_flags;
1122 u8 band;
1123 u8 antenna;
1124 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001125 u8 chains;
1126 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001127 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001128};
1129
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001130/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001131 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1132 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1133 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1134 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1135 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1136 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1137 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1138 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1139 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1140 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1141 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1142 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1143 * @data field.
1144 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1145 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1146 * length
1147 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1148 *
1149 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1150 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1151 * data.
1152 */
1153struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1154 u32 present;
1155 u8 align;
1156 u8 oui[3];
1157 u8 subns;
1158 u8 pad;
1159 u16 len;
1160 u8 data[];
1161} __packed;
1162
1163/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001164 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1165 *
1166 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1167 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001168 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1169 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1170 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001171 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1172 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1173 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1174 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1175 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1176 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1177 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001178 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1179 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1180 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1181 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1182 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001183 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1184 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001185 */
1186enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001187 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001188 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001189 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001190 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001191};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001192
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001193
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001194/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001195 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1196 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001197 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001198 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001199 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001200 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001201 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001202 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001203 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001204 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001205 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1206 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001207 */
1208enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001209 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001210 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001211 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001212 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001213 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1214 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1215 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001216 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001217};
1218
1219/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001220 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1221 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001222 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1223 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1224 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1225 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1226 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001227 */
1228enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1229 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1230 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1231 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1232 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1233
1234 /* keep last */
1235 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1236};
1237
1238/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001239 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1240 *
1241 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1242 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001243 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1244 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001245 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001246 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1247 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1248 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001249 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1250 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1251 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1252 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001253 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1254 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001255 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001256 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001257 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001258 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001259 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001260 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1261 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001262 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001263 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1264 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001265 *
1266 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1267 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001268 * configured for an HT channel.
1269 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1270 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001271 */
1272struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001273 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001274 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001275
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001276 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001277 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001278
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001279 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1280
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001281 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001282 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001283 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001284};
1285
1286/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001287 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1288 *
1289 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1290 * operation.
1291 *
1292 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1293 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1294 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1295 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001296 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1297 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001298 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1299 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001300 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001301 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1302 */
1303struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1304 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001305 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001306 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001307 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001308 u8 count;
1309};
1310
1311/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001312 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1313 *
1314 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1315 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001316 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1317 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1318 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1319 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001320 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1321 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1322 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1323 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001324 */
1325enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1326 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001327 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001328 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001329};
1330
1331/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001332 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1333 *
1334 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1335 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1336 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001337 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001338 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1339 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001340 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001341 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1342 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001343 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1344 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1345 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001346 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1347 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1348 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1349 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001350 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1351 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001352 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1353 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1354 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1355 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1356 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001357 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001358 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001359 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001360 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1361 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001362 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1363 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001364 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001365 */
1366struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001367 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001368 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001369 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001370 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001371 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001372
1373 u8 cab_queue;
1374 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1375
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001376 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1377
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001378 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1379
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001380 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001381
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001382#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1383 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1384#endif
1385
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001386 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1387
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001388 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001389 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001390};
1391
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001392static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1393{
1394#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001395 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001396#endif
1397 return false;
1398}
1399
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001400/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001401 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1402 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1403 *
1404 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1405 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1406 *
1407 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1408 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1409 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1410 */
1411struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1412
1413/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001414 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1415 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1416 *
1417 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1418 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1419 *
1420 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1421 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1422 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1423 */
1424struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1425
1426/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001427 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1428 *
1429 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1430 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1431 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001432 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1433 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001434 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1435 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001436 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1437 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1438 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001439 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1440 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001441 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001442 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1443 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001444 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001445 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001446 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001447 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1448 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1449 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001450 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1451 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1452 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1453 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1454 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1455 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1456 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001457 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001458 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001459 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001460 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1461 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1462 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001463 */
1464enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001465 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1466 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1467 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1468 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1469 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1470 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1471 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001472 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001473};
1474
1475/**
1476 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1477 *
1478 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1479 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1480 *
1481 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1482 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001483 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001484 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001485 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX on non-TKIP keys, may be used by the driver
1486 * as well if it needs to do software PN assignment by itself
1487 * (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001488 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1489 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1490 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001491 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1492 * data block:
1493 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1494 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1495 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001496 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1497 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001498 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001499struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001500 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001501 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001502 u8 icv_len;
1503 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001504 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001505 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001506 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001507 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001508 u8 key[0];
1509};
1510
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001511#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1512
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001513/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001514 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1515 *
1516 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1517 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1518 * reverse order than in packet)
1519 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1520 * reverse order than in packet)
1521 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1522 * reverse order than in packet)
1523 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1524 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001525 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001526 */
1527struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1528 union {
1529 struct {
1530 u32 iv32;
1531 u16 iv16;
1532 } tkip;
1533 struct {
1534 u8 pn[6];
1535 } ccmp;
1536 struct {
1537 u8 pn[6];
1538 } aes_cmac;
1539 struct {
1540 u8 pn[6];
1541 } aes_gmac;
1542 struct {
1543 u8 pn[6];
1544 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001545 struct {
1546 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1547 u8 seq_len;
1548 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001549 };
1550};
1551
1552/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001553 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1554 *
1555 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1556 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1557 *
1558 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1559 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1560 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1561 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1562 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1563 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1564 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1565 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1566 * key_idx value calculation:
1567 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1568 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1569 */
1570struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1571 u32 cipher;
1572 u16 iftype;
1573 u8 hdr_len;
1574 u8 pn_len;
1575 u8 pn_off;
1576 u8 key_idx_off;
1577 u8 key_idx_mask;
1578 u8 key_idx_shift;
1579 u8 mic_len;
1580};
1581
1582/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001583 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1584 *
1585 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1586 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1587 *
1588 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1589 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1590 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001591enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001592 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001593};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001594
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001595/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001596 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1597 *
1598 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1599 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1600 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1601 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1602 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1603 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1604 */
1605enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1606 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1607 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1608 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1609 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1610 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1611 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1612};
1613
1614/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001615 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1616 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1617 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1618 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1619 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1620 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1621 *
1622 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1623 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1624 */
1625enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1626 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1627 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1628 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1629 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1630};
1631
1632/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001633 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1634 *
1635 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001636 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001637 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1638 */
1639struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1640 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1641 struct {
1642 s8 idx;
1643 u8 count;
1644 u8 count_cts;
1645 u8 count_rts;
1646 u16 flags;
1647 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1648};
1649
1650/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001651 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1652 *
1653 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1654 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1655 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1656 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1657 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001658 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001659 *
1660 * @addr: MAC address
1661 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001662 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001663 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1664 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001665 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1666 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001667 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1668 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001669 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1670 * if wme is supported.
1671 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001672 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001673 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1674 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1675 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1676 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001677 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001678 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001679 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001680 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1681 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301682 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001683 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001684 */
1685struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001686 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001687 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1688 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001689 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001690 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001691 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001692 u8 uapsd_queues;
1693 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001694 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001695 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001696 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001697 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001698 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001699 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301700 bool mfp;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001701
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001702 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1703
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001704 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001705 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001706};
1707
1708/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001709 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1710 *
1711 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301712 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001713 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001714 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1715 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1716 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001717enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001718 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1719};
1720
1721/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001722 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1723 *
1724 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1725 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1726 */
1727struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1728 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1729};
1730
1731/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001732 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1733 *
1734 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1735 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1736 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1737 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001738 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001739 *
1740 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1741 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1742 */
1743struct ieee80211_txq {
1744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1745 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1746 u8 tid;
1747 u8 ac;
1748
1749 /* must be last */
1750 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1751};
1752
1753/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001754 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1755 *
1756 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1757 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1758 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1759 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1760 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1761 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001762 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1763 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1764 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1765 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1766 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1767 * algorithm.
1768 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1769 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1770 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1771 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1772 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1773 * CCK frames.
1774 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001775 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1776 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1777 * the FCS at the end.
1778 *
1779 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1780 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1781 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1782 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1783 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1784 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001785 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001786 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001787 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1788 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1789 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1790 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1791 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001792 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1793 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1794 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1795 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1796 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001797 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1798 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1799 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301800 *
1801 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1802 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001803 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001804 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1805 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1806 *
1807 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1808 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1809 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1810 *
1811 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1812 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001813 *
1814 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1815 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001816 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301817 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1818 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1819 * the stack.
1820 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001821 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001822 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1823 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001824 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001825 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1826 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1827 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001828 *
1829 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1830 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1831 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1832 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1833 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1834 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001835 *
1836 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1837 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1838 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1839 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1840 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1841 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001842 *
1843 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1844 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1845 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001846 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001847 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1848 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1849 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001850 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001851 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1852 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1853 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1854 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001855 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1856 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1857 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1858 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1859 * supported cipher suites.
1860 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001861 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1862 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1863 * for frames.
1864 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001865 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1866 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1867 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1868 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001869 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001870 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1871 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1872 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001873 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1874 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1875 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001876 *
1877 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1878 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001879 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001880 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1881 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1882 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1883 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001884 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1885 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1886 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1887 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001888 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001889 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1890 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1891 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001892 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001893 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001894 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001895 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1896 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1897 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001898 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
1899 * within A-MPDU.
1900 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001901 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
1902 * for sent beacons.
1903 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001904 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
1905 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
1906 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
1907 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
1908 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001909 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001910 */
1911enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001912 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
1913 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
1914 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
1915 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
1916 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
1917 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
1918 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
1919 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
1920 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
1921 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
1922 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
1923 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
1924 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
1925 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
1926 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
1927 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
1928 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
1929 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
1930 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
1931 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
1932 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
1933 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
1934 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
1935 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
1936 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
1937 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
1938 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
1939 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
1940 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001941 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001942 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001943 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001944 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001945
1946 /* keep last, obviously */
1947 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001948};
1949
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001950/**
1951 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001952 *
1953 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1954 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1955 *
1956 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1957 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1958 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001959 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1960 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001961 *
1962 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1963 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001964 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1965 * along with this structure.
1966 *
1967 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1968 *
1969 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1970 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1971 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001972 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1973 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001974 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001975 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001976 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001977 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001978 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001979 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001980 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001981 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001982 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1983 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1984 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001985 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1986 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1987 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001988 *
1989 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1990 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001991 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1992 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001993 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1994 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001995 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1996 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001997 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001998 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1999 * can handle.
2000 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2001 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002002 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002003 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002004 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2005 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2006 * aggregation.
2007 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2008 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2009 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002010 *
2011 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002012 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2013 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2014 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2015 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002016 *
2017 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2018 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002019 *
2020 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2021 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2022 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2023 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002024 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002025 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2026 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2027 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2028 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002029 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002030 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2031 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002032 *
2033 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2034 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2035 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2036 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2037 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2038 * neither enabled.
2039 *
2040 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2041 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2042 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002043 *
2044 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2045 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2046 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002047 *
2048 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2049 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002050 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002051struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002052 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002053 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002054 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002055 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002056 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002057 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002058 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002059 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002060 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002061 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002062 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002063 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002064 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002065 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002066 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002067 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002068 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002069 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002070 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002071 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002072 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002073 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002074 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002075 u8 uapsd_queues;
2076 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002077 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2078 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002079 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002080};
2081
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002082static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2083 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2084{
2085 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2086}
2087#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2088
2089static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2090 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2091{
2092 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2093}
2094#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2095
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002096/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002097 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2098 *
2099 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2100 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2101 */
2102struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2103 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2104
2105 /* Keep last */
2106 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2107};
2108
2109/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002110 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2111 *
2112 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2113 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2114 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2115 * @status: channel-switch response status
2116 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2117 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2118 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2119 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2120 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2121 */
2122struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2123 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2124 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2125 u8 action_code;
2126 u32 status;
2127 u32 timestamp;
2128 u16 switch_time;
2129 u16 switch_timeout;
2130 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2131 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2132};
2133
2134/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002135 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2136 *
2137 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2138 *
2139 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2140 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2141 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2142 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2143 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002144 *
2145 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002146 */
2147struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2148
2149/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002150 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2151 *
2152 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2153 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2154 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002155static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2156{
2157 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2158}
2159
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002160/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002161 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002162 *
2163 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2164 * @addr: the address to set
2165 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002166static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2167{
2168 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2169}
2170
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002171static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2172ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002173 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002174{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002175 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002176 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002177 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002178}
2179
2180static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2181ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002182 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002183{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002184 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002185 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002186 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002187}
2188
2189static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2190ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002191 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002192{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002193 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002194 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002195 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002196}
2197
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002198/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002199 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2200 * @hw: the hardware
2201 * @skb: the skb
2202 *
2203 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2204 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2205 */
2206void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2207
2208/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002209 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002210 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002211 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2212 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2213 *
2214 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2215 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002216 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2217 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2218 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002219 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2220 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2221 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002222 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2223 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2224 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2225 *
2226 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2227 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2228 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2229 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2230 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002231 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2232 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2233 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2234 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2235 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002236 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2237 *
2238 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2239 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2240 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2241 * based on the receive flags.
2242 *
2243 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2244 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2245 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2246 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002247 *
2248 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2249 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2250 * handler.
2251 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002252 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002253 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2254 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002255 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002256 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002257 *
2258 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2259 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2260 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002261 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002262
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002263/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002264 * DOC: Powersave support
2265 *
2266 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2267 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002268 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2269 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2270 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2271 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2272 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2273 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2274 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2275 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002276 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002277 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2278 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2279 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002280 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2281 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002282 *
2283 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2284 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2285 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002286 *
2287 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2288 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2289 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2290 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002291 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2292 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002293 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002294 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002295 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2296 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2297 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2298 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2299 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2300 * periods.
2301 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002302 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002303 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2304 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2305 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2306 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2307 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2308 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2309 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2310 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2311 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2312 *
2313 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002314 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002315 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002316 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2317 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2318 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2319 *
2320 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2321 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002322 */
2323
2324/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002325 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2326 *
2327 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002328 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002329 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2330 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2331 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2332 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2333 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2334 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002335 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2336 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002337 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2338 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2339 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2340 *
2341 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2342 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2343 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2344 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2345 *
2346 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2347 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2348 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2349 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2350 * - a list of information element IDs
2351 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2352 *
2353 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2354 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2355 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2356 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2357 * vendor information elements.
2358 *
2359 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2360 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2361 *
2362 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2363 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2364 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2365 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2366 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2367 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2368 *
2369 *
2370 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2371 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2372 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2373 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2374 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2375 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2376 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2377 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2378 *
2379 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2380 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2381 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002382 */
2383
2384/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002385 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2386 *
2387 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2388 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2389 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2390 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2391 *
2392 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2393 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2394 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2395 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2396 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2397 * hardware flags.
2398 *
2399 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2400 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2401 * turned off otherwise.
2402 *
2403 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2404 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2405 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2406 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2407 */
2408
2409/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002410 * DOC: Frame filtering
2411 *
2412 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2413 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2414 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2415 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2416 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2417 *
2418 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2419 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2420 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2421 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002422 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2423 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2424 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2425 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2426 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2427 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2428 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002429 *
2430 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2431 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2432 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2433 * or dropped.
2434 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002435 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2436 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2437 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2438 * the flag, but not clear it.
2439 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2440 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2441 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2442 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2443 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2444 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2445 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2446 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002447 */
2448
2449/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002450 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2451 *
2452 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2453 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2454 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2455 *
2456 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2457 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2458 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2459 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2460 * the driver code.
2461 *
2462 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2463 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2464 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2465 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2466 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2467 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2468 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2469 *
2470 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2471 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2472 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2473 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2474 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2475 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2476 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2477 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2478 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2479 * @sta_notify callback.
2480 *
2481 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2482 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2483 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2484 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2485 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2486 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2487 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002488 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002489 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2490 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2491 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2492 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2493 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2494 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2495 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002496 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2497 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2498 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002499 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2500 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2501 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2502 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2503 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2504 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2505 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2506 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2507 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2508 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2509 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2510 *
2511 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2512 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2513 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2514 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2515 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2516 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2517 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2518 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2519 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2520 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002521 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002522 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2523 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2524 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2525 *
2526 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2527 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2528 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2529 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2530 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002531 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002532 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2533 *
2534 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2535 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2536 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2537 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002538 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002539 *
2540 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2541 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2542 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2543 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002544 */
2545
2546/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002547 * DOC: HW queue control
2548 *
2549 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2550 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2551 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2552 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2553 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2554 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2555 *
2556 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2557 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2558 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2559 *
2560 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2561 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2562 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2563 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2564 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2565 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2566 * the hardware queue.
2567 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2568 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2569 *
2570 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2571 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2572 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2573 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2574 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2575 *
2576 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2577 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2578 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2579 * off-channel queue: 9
2580 *
2581 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2582 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2583 *
2584 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2585 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2586 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2587 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2588 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2589 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2590 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2591 *
2592 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2593 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2594 *
2595 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2596 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2597 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2598 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2599 */
2600
2601/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002602 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2603 *
2604 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2605 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2606 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2607 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2608 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002609 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2610 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2611 * multicast address.
2612 *
2613 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2614 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2615 *
2616 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2617 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2618 *
2619 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2620 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2621 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2622 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2623 * honour this flag if possible.
2624 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002625 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2626 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002627 *
2628 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002629 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002630 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002631 *
2632 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002633 */
2634enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002635 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2636 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2637 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2638 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2639 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2640 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002641 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002642 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002643};
2644
2645/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002646 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2647 *
2648 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2649 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002650 *
2651 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2652 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002653 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002654 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2655 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002656 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2657 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2658 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002659 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002660 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2661 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2662 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2663 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2664 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2665 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2666 * session is gone and removes the station.
2667 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2668 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2669 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2670 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002671 */
2672enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2673 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2674 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002675 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002676 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2677 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2678 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002679 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002680};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002681
2682/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002683 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2684 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002685 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2686 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002687 */
2688enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2689 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002690 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002691};
2692
2693/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002694 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2695 *
2696 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002697 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2698 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2699 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002700 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002701 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2702 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2703 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002704 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2705 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002706 */
2707enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2708 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2709 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002710 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002711 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002712};
2713
2714/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002715 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2716 *
2717 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2718 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2719 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2720 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2721 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2722 *
2723 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2724 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2725 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2726 */
2727enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2728 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2729 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2730};
2731
2732/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002733 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2734 *
2735 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2736 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2737 *
2738 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2739 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2740 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2741 * of wowlan configuration)
2742 */
2743enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2744 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2745 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2746};
2747
2748/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002749 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2750 *
2751 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2752 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2753 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2754 *
2755 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2756 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2757 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002758 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002759 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002760 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002761 *
2762 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2763 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2764 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2765 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2766 * or zero.
2767 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2768 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2769 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002770 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002771 *
2772 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2773 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2774 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2775 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002776 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2777 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002778 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002779 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002780 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2781 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2782 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2783 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2784 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002785 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2786 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2787 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2788 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002789 *
2790 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2791 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2792 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2793 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2794 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2795 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002796 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2797 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2798 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2799 * in suspend().
2800 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002801 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002802 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002803 * and @stop must be implemented.
2804 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2805 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2806 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2807 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2808 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002809 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002810 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002811 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2812 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2813 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2814 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2815 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2816 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002817 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2818 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2819 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2820 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2821 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2822 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2823 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002824 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002825 *
2826 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2827 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002828 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002829 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002830 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002831 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2832 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2833 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2834 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2835 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002836 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2837 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002838 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002839 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2840 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2841 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2842 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002843 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2844 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002845 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002846 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03002847 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
2848 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
2849 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
2850 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
2851 * which flags are changed.
2852 * This callback can sleep.
2853 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002854 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002855 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002856 *
2857 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002858 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2859 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002860 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002861 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002862 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002863 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002864 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2865 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2866 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002867 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002868 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002869 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2870 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2871 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2872 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2873 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2874 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002875 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2876 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2877 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2878 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002879 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002880 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002881 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2882 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002883 * that power save is disabled.
2884 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2885 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2886 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2887 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2888 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2889 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2890 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002891 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002892 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002893 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2894 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2895 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2896 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2897 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2898 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2899 * The callback can sleep.
2900 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002901 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2902 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2903 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2904 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2905 *
2906 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002907 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002908 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002909 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2910 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002911 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2912 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2913 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002914 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002915 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2916 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2917 * this notification.
2918 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002919 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002920 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2921 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002922 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002923 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02002924 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
2925 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
2926 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002927 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002928 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002929 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2930 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2931 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2932 * The callback can sleep.
2933 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002934 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002935 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002936 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002937 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2938 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2939 *
2940 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002941 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2942 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2943 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2944 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2945 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002946 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302947 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2948 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2949 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2950 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2951 *
2952 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2953 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2954 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002955 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002956 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2957 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2958 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002959 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002960 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2961 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2962 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2963 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002964 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2965 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2966 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2967 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2968 * The callback can sleep.
2969 *
2970 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2971 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2972 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2973 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2974 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002975 * The callback can sleep.
2976 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002977 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2978 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2979 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2980 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2981 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2982 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2983 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002984 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2985 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2986 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002987 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002988 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2989 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2990 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2991 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2992 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2993 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2994 * The callback can sleep.
2995 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002996 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002997 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002998 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002999 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003000 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003001 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003002 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003003 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003004 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003005 *
3006 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003007 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003008 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003009 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003010 *
3011 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3012 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3013 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3014 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003015 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003016 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003017 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3018 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3019 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003020 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003021 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003022 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003023 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3024 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3025 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3026 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003027 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003028 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003029 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
3030 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003031 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
3032 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
3033 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3034 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3035 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3036 * - TX: 1.....7
3037 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3038 * - TX: 8..1...
3039 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3040 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3041 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3042 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
Emmanuel Grumbache3abc8f2015-08-16 11:13:22 +03003043 * The @amsdu parameter is valid when the action is set to
3044 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's ability
3045 * to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003046 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003047 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003048 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003049 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003050 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3051 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003052 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3053 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3054 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003055 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003056 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003057 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3058 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003059 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3060 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3061 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003062 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003063 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3064 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003065 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003066 *
3067 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003068 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3069 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3070 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3071 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003072 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003073 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003074 *
3075 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3076 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3077 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3078 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003079 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003080 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3081 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3082 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3083 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3084 *
3085 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003086 *
3087 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3088 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3089 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3090 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3091 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3092 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003093 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003094 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3095 * must be accepted in this case.
3096 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003097 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3098 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003099 *
3100 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3101 *
3102 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303103 *
3104 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3105 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303106 *
3107 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3108 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3109 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003110 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3111 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003112 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003113 *
3114 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3115 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3116 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3117 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003118 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003119 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3120 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3121 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3122 * more-data bit must always be set.
3123 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3124 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003125 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3126 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3127 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3128 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3129 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3130 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003131 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3132 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3133 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003134 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3135 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003136 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003137 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003138 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003139 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3140 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3141 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003142 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003143 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3144 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3145 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3146 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003147 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003148 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003149 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3150 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3151 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003152 *
3153 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3154 *
3155 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3156 *
3157 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3158 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3159 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003160 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3161 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3162 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3163 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3164 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3165 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3166 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3167 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3168 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3169 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3170 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3171 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003172 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003173 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3174 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3175 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3176 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3177 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3178 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3179 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3180 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3181 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003182 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303183 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003184 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303185 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003186 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3187 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3188 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303189 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003190 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3191 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303192 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003193 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3194 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303195 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003196 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3197 * another, as specified in the list of
3198 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3199 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303200 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003201 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003202 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3203 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3204 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3205 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3206 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3207 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3208 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003209 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003210 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3211 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3212 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3213 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3214 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003215 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003216 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3217 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3218 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003219 *
3220 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3221 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3222 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003223 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003224 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3225 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003226 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003227 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003228 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3229 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003230 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3231 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3232 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3233 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003234 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3235 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3236 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003237 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003238 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3239 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3240 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3241 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003242 *
3243 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3244 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3245 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003246 *
3247 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3248 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003249 *
3250 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3251 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3252 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3253 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3254 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3255 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3256 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3257 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3258 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003259 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3260 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3261 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3262 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3263 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3264 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3265 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003266 *
3267 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003268 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003269struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003270 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3271 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3272 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003273 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003274 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003275#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3276 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3277 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003278 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003279#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003280 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003281 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003282 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3283 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003284 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003285 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003286 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003287 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003288 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3289 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3290 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3291 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003292
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003293 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3294 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3295
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003296 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003297 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003298 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3299 unsigned int changed_flags,
3300 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003301 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003302 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3303 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3304 unsigned int filter_flags,
3305 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003306 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3307 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003308 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003310 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003311 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003312 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3313 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3314 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3315 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003316 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3317 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3318 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003319 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3320 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003321 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003322 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003323 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3324 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003325 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3326 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3327 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003328 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003329 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003330 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003331 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3332 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3333 const u8 *mac_addr);
3334 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3335 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003336 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3337 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003338 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3339 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3340 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003341 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003342 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003343 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3344 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3345 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3346 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303347#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3348 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3349 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3350 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3351 struct dentry *dir);
3352 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3353 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3354 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3355 struct dentry *dir);
3356#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003357 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003358 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003359 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3360 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3361 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3362 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003363 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3364 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3365 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003366 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3367 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3368 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3369 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003370 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3371 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3372 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003373 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3374 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3375 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3376 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003377 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003379 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003380 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3381 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3382 u64 tsf);
3383 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003384 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003385 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003386 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003387 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003388 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
Emmanuel Grumbache3abc8f2015-08-16 11:13:22 +03003389 u8 buf_size, bool amsdu);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003390 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3391 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003392 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003393 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003394#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003395 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3396 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003397 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3398 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3399 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003400#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003401 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3402 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003403 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003404 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003405 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003406 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3407 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003408
3409 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003411 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003412 int duration,
3413 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003414 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003415 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3416 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3417 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303418 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303419 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3420 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003421 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3422 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3423 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003424
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003425 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3426 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3427 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3428 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3429 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003430 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3431 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3432 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3433 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3434 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003435
3436 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3437 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3438 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3440 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3441 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3442 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3443 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003444
3445 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3446 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003447
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003448 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3449 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3450
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003451 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3452 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3453 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3454 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3455 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3456 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3457 u32 changed);
3458 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3459 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3460 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3461 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3462 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3463 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003464 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3465 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3466 int n_vifs,
3467 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003468
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003469 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3470 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003471
3472#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3473 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3474 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3475 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3476#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003477 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3479 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003480 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3481 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3482 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003483
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003484 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3486
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003487 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3488 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003489 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003490 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3491 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003492
3493 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3494 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3495 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3496 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003497 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003498 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3500 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003501 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3503 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003504
3505 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3506 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003507};
3508
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003509/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003510 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3511 *
3512 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3513 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3514 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3515 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3516 * @priv_data_len.
3517 *
3518 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3519 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3520 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3521 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3522 *
3523 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3524 */
3525struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3526 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3527 const char *requested_name);
3528
3529/**
3530 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003531 *
3532 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3533 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3534 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3535 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3536 * @priv_data_len.
3537 *
3538 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3539 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003540 *
3541 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003542 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003543static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003544struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003545 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3546{
3547 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3548}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003549
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003550/**
3551 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3552 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003553 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3554 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3555 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003556 *
3557 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003558 *
3559 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003560 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003561int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3562
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003563/**
3564 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3565 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3566 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3567 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3568 */
3569struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3570 int throughput;
3571 int blink_time;
3572};
3573
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003574/**
3575 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3576 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3577 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3578 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3579 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3580 */
3581enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3582 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3583 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3584 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3585};
3586
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003587#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003588const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3589const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3590const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3591const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3592const char *
3593__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3594 unsigned int flags,
3595 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3596 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003597#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003598/**
3599 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3600 *
3601 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3602 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3603 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3604 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3605 *
3606 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003607 *
3608 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003609 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003610static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003611{
3612#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3613 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3614#else
3615 return NULL;
3616#endif
3617}
3618
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003619/**
3620 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3621 *
3622 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3623 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3624 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3625 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3626 *
3627 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003628 *
3629 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003630 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003631static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003632{
3633#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3634 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3635#else
3636 return NULL;
3637#endif
3638}
3639
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003640/**
3641 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3642 *
3643 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3644 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3645 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3646 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3647 *
3648 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003649 *
3650 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003651 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003652static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003653{
3654#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3655 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3656#else
3657 return NULL;
3658#endif
3659}
3660
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003661/**
3662 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3663 *
3664 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3665 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3666 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3667 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3668 *
3669 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003670 *
3671 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003672 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003673static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003674{
3675#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3676 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3677#else
3678 return NULL;
3679#endif
3680}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003681
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003682/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003683 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3684 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003685 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003686 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3687 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3688 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003689 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3690 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3691 *
3692 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003693 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003694static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003695ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003696 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3697 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3698{
3699#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003700 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003701 blink_table_len);
3702#else
3703 return NULL;
3704#endif
3705}
3706
3707/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003708 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3709 *
3710 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3711 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3712 *
3713 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3714 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003715void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3716
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003717/**
3718 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3719 *
3720 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3721 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003722 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003723 *
3724 * @hw: the hardware to free
3725 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003726void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3727
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003728/**
3729 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3730 *
3731 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3732 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3733 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3734 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3735 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3736 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3737 *
3738 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3739 */
3740void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3741
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003742/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003743 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003744 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003745 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3746 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3747 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3748 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3749 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3750 *
3751 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3752 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3753 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3754 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3755 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3756 *
3757 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3758 *
3759 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3760 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3761 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003762 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003763void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3764 struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003765
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003766/**
3767 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3768 *
3769 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003770 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3771 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3772 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3773 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003774 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003775 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003776 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3777 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003778 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3779 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003780 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003781 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003782 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003783 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3784 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003785 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003786static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3787{
3788 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, skb, NULL);
3789}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003790
3791/**
3792 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3793 *
3794 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003795 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3796 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003797 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003798 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3799 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003800 *
3801 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3802 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003803 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003804void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003805
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003806/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003807 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3808 *
3809 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3810 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3811 *
3812 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003813 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3814 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003815 *
3816 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3817 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3818 */
3819static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3820 struct sk_buff *skb)
3821{
3822 local_bh_disable();
3823 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3824 local_bh_enable();
3825}
3826
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003827/**
3828 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3829 *
3830 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3831 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3832 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3833 *
3834 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3835 *
3836 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3837 * each other.
3838 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003839 * @sta: currently connected sta
3840 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003841 *
3842 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003843 */
3844int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3845
3846/**
3847 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3848 * (in process context)
3849 *
3850 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3851 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3852 * applies.
3853 *
3854 * @sta: currently connected sta
3855 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003856 *
3857 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003858 */
3859static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3860 bool start)
3861{
3862 int ret;
3863
3864 local_bh_disable();
3865 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3866 local_bh_enable();
3867
3868 return ret;
3869}
3870
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003871/*
3872 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3873 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3874 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003875#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003876
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003877/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003878 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003879 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003880 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3881 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003882 *
3883 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003884 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3885 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003886 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003887 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3888 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3889 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3890 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3891 *
3892 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3893 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3894 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3895 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3896 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3897 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3898 *
3899 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3900 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3901 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3902 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3903 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003904 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003905void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3906 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003907
3908/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003909 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3910 *
3911 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3912 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3913 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3914 *
3915 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3916 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3917 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3918 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3919 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3920 */
3921void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3922 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3923 struct sk_buff *skb,
3924 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3925 int max_rates);
3926
3927/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003928 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3929 *
3930 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3931 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3932 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3933 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003934 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3935 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003936 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003937 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3938 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003939 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003940 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3941 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003942 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003943void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003944 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003945
3946/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003947 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3948 *
3949 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3950 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3951 * specific skbs.
3952 *
3953 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3954 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3955 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3956 *
3957 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3958 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3959 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3960 * @info: tx status information
3961 */
3962void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3963 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3964 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3965
3966/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003967 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3968 *
3969 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3970 *
3971 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3972 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3973 * for a single hardware.
3974 *
3975 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3976 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3977 */
3978static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979 struct sk_buff *skb)
3980{
3981 local_bh_disable();
3982 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3983 local_bh_enable();
3984}
3985
3986/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003987 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003988 *
3989 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3990 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3991 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003992 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3993 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003994 *
3995 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3996 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003997 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003998void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003999 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004000
4001/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004002 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4003 *
4004 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4005 * connected STA.
4006 *
4007 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4008 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4009 */
4010void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4011
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004012#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4013
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004014/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004015 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4016 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4017 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004018 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4019 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4020 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004021 */
4022struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4023 u16 tim_offset;
4024 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004025
4026 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004027};
4028
4029/**
4030 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4031 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4032 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4033 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4034 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4035 *
4036 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4037 * obtain the beacon template.
4038 *
4039 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4040 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004041 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4042 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004043 *
4044 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4045 *
4046 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4047 */
4048struct sk_buff *
4049ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4050 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4051 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4052
4053/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004054 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4055 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004056 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004057 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4058 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4059 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4060 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4061 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4062 *
4063 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004064 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004065 *
4066 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4067 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004068 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4069 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004070 *
4071 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004072 *
4073 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004074 */
4075struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4076 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4077 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4078
4079/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004080 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4081 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004082 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004083 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004084 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004085 *
4086 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004087 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004088static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4089 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4090{
4091 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4092}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004093
4094/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004095 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4096 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4097 *
4098 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4099 * This function is called implicitly when
4100 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4101 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4102 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4103 *
4104 * Return: new csa counter value
4105 */
4106u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4107
4108/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004109 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4110 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4111 *
4112 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004113 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004114 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4115 */
4116void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4117
4118/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004119 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004120 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4121 *
4122 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4123 */
4124bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4125
4126
4127/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004128 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4129 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4130 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4131 *
4132 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4133 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4134 *
4135 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004136 *
4137 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004138 */
4139struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4140 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4141
4142/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004143 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4144 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4145 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4146 *
4147 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4148 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4149 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4150 *
4151 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4152 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004153 *
4154 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004155 */
4156struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4157 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4158
4159/**
4160 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4161 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4162 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4163 *
4164 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4165 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4166 * BSSID and address is used.
4167 *
4168 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4169 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004170 *
4171 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004172 */
4173struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4175
4176/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004177 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4178 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004179 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004180 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4181 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004182 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004183 *
4184 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4185 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004186 *
4187 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004188 */
4189struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004190 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004191 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004192 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004193
4194/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004195 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4196 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004197 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004198 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4199 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004200 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004201 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4202 *
4203 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4204 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4205 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4206 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4207 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004208void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004209 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004210 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004211 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4212
4213/**
4214 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4215 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004216 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004217 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004218 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004219 *
4220 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4221 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4222 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004223 *
4224 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004225 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004226__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4227 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004228 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004229
4230/**
4231 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4232 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004233 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004234 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4235 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004236 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004237 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4238 *
4239 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4240 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4241 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4242 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4243 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004244void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4245 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004246 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004247 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004248 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4249
4250/**
4251 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4252 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004253 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004254 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004255 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004256 *
4257 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4258 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4259 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004260 *
4261 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004262 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004263__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4264 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004265 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004266 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004267
4268/**
4269 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4270 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004271 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004272 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004273 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004274 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004275 *
4276 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4277 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004278 *
4279 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004280 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004281__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4282 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004283 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004284 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004285 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004286
4287/**
4288 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4289 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004290 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004291 *
4292 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4293 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4294 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4295 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004296 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4297 *
4298 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4299 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004300 *
4301 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4302 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4303 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4304 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4305 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4306 * use common code for all beacons.
4307 */
4308struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004309ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004310
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004311/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004312 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4313 *
4314 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4315 *
4316 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4317 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4318 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4319 */
4320void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4321 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4322
4323/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004324 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004325 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004326 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4327 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004328 *
4329 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004330 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4331 * with this P1K
4332 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004333 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004334static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4335 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4336{
4337 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4338 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4339 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4340
4341 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4342}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004343
4344/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004345 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4346 *
4347 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4348 * and transmitter address.
4349 *
4350 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4351 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4352 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4353 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4354 */
4355void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4356 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4357
4358/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004359 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4360 *
4361 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4362 * in the packet.
4363 *
4364 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4365 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4366 * encrypted with this key
4367 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4368 */
4369void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4370 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004371
4372/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004373 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4374 *
4375 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4376 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4377 *
4378 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4379 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4380 * offloaded to the device.
4381 *
4382 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4383 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4384 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4385 */
4386void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4387 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4388
4389/**
4390 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4391 *
4392 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004393 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004394 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4395 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4396 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4397 *
4398 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4399 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4400 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4401 *
4402 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4403 * can be done concurrently.
4404 */
4405void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4406 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4407
4408/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004409 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4410 *
4411 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4412 * @seq: new sequence data
4413 *
4414 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4415 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4416 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4417 * ARP requests.
4418 *
4419 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4420 * can be done concurrently.
4421 */
4422void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4423 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4424
4425/**
4426 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4427 *
4428 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004429 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004430 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4431 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4432 * @seq: new sequence data
4433 *
4434 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4435 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4436 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4437 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4438 *
4439 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4440 * can be done concurrently.
4441 */
4442void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4443 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4444
4445/**
4446 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4447 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4448 *
4449 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4450 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4451 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4452 *
4453 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4454 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4455 */
4456void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4457
4458/**
4459 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4460 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4461 * @keyconf: new key data
4462 *
4463 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4464 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4465 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4466 *
4467 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4468 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4469 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4470 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4471 *
4472 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4473 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4474 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4475 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4476 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4477 * of the reconfiguration.
4478 *
4479 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4480 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4481 *
4482 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4483 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4484 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4485 * the key that's being replaced.
4486 */
4487struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4488ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4489 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4490
4491/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004492 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4493 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4494 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4495 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4496 * @gfp: allocation flags
4497 */
4498void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4499 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4500
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004501/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004502 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4503 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4504 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4505 *
4506 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4507 */
4508void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4509
4510/**
4511 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4512 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4513 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4514 *
4515 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4516 */
4517void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4518
4519/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004520 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4521 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4522 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4523 *
4524 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004525 *
4526 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004527 */
4528
4529int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4530
4531/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004532 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4533 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4534 *
4535 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4536 */
4537void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4538
4539/**
4540 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4541 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4542 *
4543 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4544 */
4545void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4546
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004547/**
4548 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4549 *
4550 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4551 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004552 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4553 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004554 *
4555 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004556 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004557 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004558void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004559
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004560/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004561 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4562 *
4563 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4564 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4565 *
4566 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4567 */
4568void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4569
4570/**
4571 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4572 *
4573 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4574 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4575 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4576 * while associating, for instance.
4577 *
4578 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4579 */
4580void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4581
4582/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004583 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4584 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4585 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4586 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4587 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4588 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4589 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4590 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004591 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004592 */
4593enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4594 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4595 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004596 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004597};
4598
4599/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004600 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4601 *
4602 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4603 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4604 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4605 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4606 *
4607 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4608 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4609 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4610 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4611 */
4612void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4613 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4614 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4615 void *data);
4616
4617/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004618 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004619 *
4620 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4621 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004622 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4623 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4624 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004625 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004626 *
4627 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004628 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004629 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004630 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4631 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004632static inline void
4633ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4634 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4635 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4636 void *data)
4637{
4638 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4639 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4640 iterator, data);
4641}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004642
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004643/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004644 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4645 *
4646 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4647 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4648 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4649 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004650 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004651 *
4652 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004653 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004654 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4655 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4656 */
4657void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004658 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004659 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4660 u8 *mac,
4661 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4662 void *data);
4663
4664/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004665 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4666 *
4667 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4668 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4669 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4670 *
4671 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4672 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4673 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4674 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4675 */
4676void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4677 u32 iter_flags,
4678 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4679 u8 *mac,
4680 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4681 void *data);
4682
4683/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004684 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4685 *
4686 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4687 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4688 * function for them.
4689 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4690 *
4691 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4692 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4693 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4694 */
4695void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4696 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4697 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4698 void *data);
4699/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004700 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4701 *
4702 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4703 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4704 *
4705 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4706 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4707 */
4708void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4709
4710/**
4711 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4712 *
4713 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4714 * workqueue.
4715 *
4716 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4717 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4718 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4719 */
4720void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4721 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4722 unsigned long delay);
4723
4724/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004725 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004726 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004727 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304728 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004729 *
4730 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004731 *
4732 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4733 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4734 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4735 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304736int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4737 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004738
4739/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004740 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004741 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004742 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4743 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4744 *
4745 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004746 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4747 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004748 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004749void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004750 u16 tid);
4751
4752/**
4753 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004754 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004755 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004756 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004757 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004758 *
4759 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4760 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4761 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4762 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004763int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004764
4765/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004766 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004767 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004768 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4769 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4770 *
4771 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004772 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4773 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004774 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004775void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004776 u16 tid);
4777
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004778/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004779 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4780 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004781 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004782 * @addr: station's address
4783 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004784 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4785 *
4786 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004787 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4788 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004789struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004790 const u8 *addr);
4791
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004792/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004793 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004794 *
4795 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004796 * @addr: remote station's address
4797 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004798 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004799 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4800 *
4801 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004802 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4803 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004804 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4805 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4806 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4807 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4808 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4809 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4810 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004811 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004812 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004813 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004814struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4815 const u8 *addr,
4816 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004817
4818/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004819 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4820 * @hw: the hardware
4821 * @pubsta: the station
4822 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4823 *
4824 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4825 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4826 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4827 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4828 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4829 *
4830 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4831 * manner.
4832 *
4833 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4834 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4835 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4836 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4837 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4838 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4839 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4840 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4841 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4842 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4843 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4844 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4845 * woke up while blocked or not.
4846 */
4847void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4848 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4849
4850/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004851 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4852 * @pubsta: the station
4853 *
4854 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4855 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4856 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4857 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4858 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004859 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4860 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4861 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4862 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4863 *
4864 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4865 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4866 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4867 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004868 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004869void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004870
4871/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02004872 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
4873 * @pubsta: the station
4874 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
4875 *
4876 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
4877 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
4878 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
4879 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
4880 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
4881 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
4882 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
4883 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
4884 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
4885 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
4886 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
4887 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
4888 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
4889 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
4890 */
4891void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
4892
4893/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004894 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4895 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4896 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4897 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4898 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4899 *
4900 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4901 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4902 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4903 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4904 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4905 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004906 *
4907 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4908 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4909 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004910 */
4911void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4913 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4914 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4915 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4916 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4917 void *data),
4918 void *iter_data);
4919
4920/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004921 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4922 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4923 * @iter: iterator function
4924 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4925 *
4926 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4927 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4928 * places while calling into the driver.
4929 *
4930 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4931 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4932 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004933 *
4934 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4935 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4936 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4937 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004938 */
4939void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4940 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4941 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4942 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4943 void *data),
4944 void *iter_data);
4945
4946/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004947 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4948 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4949 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4950 *
4951 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4952 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4953 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4954 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4955 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004956 * %NULL.
4957 *
4958 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004959 */
4960struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4962
4963/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004964 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4965 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004966 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004967 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004968 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004969 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004970 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4971 */
4972void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004973
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004974/**
4975 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4976 *
4977 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4978 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004979 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004980 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4981 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004982 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4983 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004984 *
4985 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4986 * without connection recovery attempts.
4987 */
4988void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4989
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004990/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004991 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4992 *
4993 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4994 *
4995 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4996 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4997 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4998 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4999 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5000 *
5001 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5002 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5003 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5004 * disconnect normally later.
5005 *
5006 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5007 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5008 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5009 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5010 */
5011void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5012
5013/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005014 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5015 * rssi threshold triggered
5016 *
5017 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5018 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5019 * @gfp: context flags
5020 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005021 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005022 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5023 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5024 */
5025void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5026 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5027 gfp_t gfp);
5028
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005029/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005030 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5031 *
5032 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5033 * @gfp: context flags
5034 */
5035void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5036
5037/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005038 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5039 *
5040 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5041 */
5042void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5043
5044/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005045 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5046 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5047 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5048 *
5049 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5050 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5051 */
5052void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5053
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005054/**
5055 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5056 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005057 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005058 *
5059 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5060 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5061 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5062 */
5063void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5064 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5065
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005066/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005067 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5068 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5069 */
5070void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5071
5072/**
5073 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5074 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5075 */
5076void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5077
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005078/**
5079 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5080 *
5081 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5082 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5083 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5084 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5085 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5086 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5087 *
5088 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5089 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5090 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5091 */
5092void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5093 const u8 *addr);
5094
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005095/**
5096 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5097 *
5098 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5099 * buffer.
5100 *
5101 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5102 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5103 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5104 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5105 */
5106void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5107
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005108/**
5109 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5110 *
5111 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5112 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5113 * reordering.
5114 *
5115 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5116 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5117 *
5118 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5119 * @addr: station mac address
5120 * @tid: the rx tid
5121 */
5122void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5123 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5124
5125/**
5126 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5127 *
5128 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5129 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5130 * reordering.
5131 *
5132 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5133 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5134 *
5135 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5136 * @addr: station mac address
5137 * @tid: the rx tid
5138 */
5139void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5140 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5141
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005142/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005143
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005144/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005145 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005146 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005147 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5148 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5149 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005150 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5151 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005152 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5153 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5154 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5155 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5156 * RTS threshold
5157 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5158 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005159 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005160 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5161 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005162 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005163 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005164 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005165 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005166struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5167 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5168 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5169 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5170 struct sk_buff *skb;
5171 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5172 bool rts, short_preamble;
5173 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005174 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005175 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005176 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005177};
5178
5179struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005180 const char *name;
5181 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005182 void (*free)(void *priv);
5183
5184 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5185 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005186 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005187 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305188 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005189 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005190 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5191 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005192 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5193 void *priv_sta);
5194
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005195 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5196 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5197 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5198 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005199 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5200 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5201 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005202 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5203 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005204
5205 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5206 struct dentry *dir);
5207 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005208
5209 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005210};
5211
5212static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5213 enum ieee80211_band band,
5214 int index)
5215{
5216 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5217}
5218
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005219/**
5220 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5221 *
5222 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5223 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5224 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5225 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5226 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5227 * not null.
5228 *
5229 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5230 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5231 *
5232 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5233 * that this may be null.
5234 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5235 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5236 */
5237bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5238 void *priv_sta,
5239 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5240
5241
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005242static inline s8
5243rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5244 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5245{
5246 int i;
5247
5248 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5249 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5250 return i;
5251
5252 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005253 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005254
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005255 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005256 return 0;
5257}
5258
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005259static inline
5260bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5261 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5262{
5263 unsigned int i;
5264
5265 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5266 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5267 return true;
5268 return false;
5269}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005270
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005271/**
5272 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5273 *
5274 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5275 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5276 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5277 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5278 *
5279 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5280 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5281 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5282 */
5283int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5284 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5285 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5286
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005287int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5288void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005289
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005290static inline bool
5291conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5292{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005293 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005294}
5295
5296static inline bool
5297conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5298{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005299 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5300 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005301}
5302
5303static inline bool
5304conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5305{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005306 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5307 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005308}
5309
5310static inline bool
5311conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5312{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005313 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005314}
5315
5316static inline bool
5317conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5318{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005319 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5320 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5321 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005322}
5323
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005324static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5325ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5326{
5327 if (p2p) {
5328 switch (type) {
5329 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5330 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5331 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5332 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5333 default:
5334 break;
5335 }
5336 }
5337 return type;
5338}
5339
5340static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5341ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5342{
5343 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5344}
5345
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005346void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5347 int rssi_min_thold,
5348 int rssi_max_thold);
5349
5350void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005351
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005352/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005353 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005354 *
5355 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5356 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005357 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5358 *
5359 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5360 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005361 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005362int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5363
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005364/**
5365 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5366 * @vif: virtual interface
5367 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5368 * @gfp: allocation flags
5369 *
5370 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5371 */
5372void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5373 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5374 gfp_t gfp);
5375
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005376/**
5377 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5378 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5379 * @vif: virtual interface
5380 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5381 * @band: the band to transmit on
5382 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5383 *
5384 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5385 */
5386bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5388 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5389
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005390/**
5391 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5392 *
5393 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5394 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5395 *
5396 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5397 *
5398 * private:
5399 *
5400 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5401 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5402 */
5403struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5404 u32 next_tsf;
5405 bool has_next_tsf;
5406
5407 u8 absent;
5408
5409 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5410 struct {
5411 u32 start;
5412 u32 duration;
5413 u32 interval;
5414 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5415};
5416
5417/**
5418 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5419 *
5420 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5421 * @data: NoA tracking data
5422 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5423 *
5424 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5425 */
5426int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5427 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5428
5429/**
5430 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5431 *
5432 * @data: NoA tracking data
5433 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5434 */
5435void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5436
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005437/**
5438 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5439 * @vif: virtual interface
5440 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5441 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5442 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5443 * @gfp: allocation flags
5444 *
5445 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5446 */
5447void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5448 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5449 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005450
5451/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005452 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5453 *
5454 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5455 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5456 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5457 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5458 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5459 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5460 *
5461 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5462 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5463 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5464 *
5465 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5466 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5467 *
5468 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5469 */
5470int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5471
5472/**
5473 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5474 *
5475 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5476 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5477 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5478 *
5479 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5480 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5481 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5482 *
5483 * @sta: the station
5484 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5485 */
5486void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5487
5488/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005489 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5490 *
5491 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5492 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5493 *
5494 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5495 */
5496struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5497 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005498#endif /* MAC80211_H */